Dakota
OWNE R ’ S MAN UAL
2 0 1 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 79
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................169
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................245
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 331
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................351
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................403
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 421
10
INDEX
...................................................................431
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publica-
tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom-
mendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is located on
the left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle.
Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle
identification number and optional equipment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫ Ignition Key Removal .................. 12
▫ Locking Doors With A Key .............. 15
䡵 Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped ......... 15
▫ To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel ...... 15
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock ........ 15
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System ............................. 15
䡵 Sentry Key威 — If Equipped ............... 16
▫ Replacement Keys ..................... 17
▫ Customer Key Programming ............. 17
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 19
▫ To Set The Alarm ..................... 19
▫ To Disarm The System ................. 19
䡵 Illuminated Entry ...................... 20
▫ Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks . . . 20
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .............. 21
▫ To Unlock The Doors .................. 22
2
▫ To Lock The Doors .................... 22
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ................. 24
▫ General Information ................... 24
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ...... 25
▫ Battery Replacement ................... 25
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped ....... 26
▫ How To Use Remote Start ............... 26
䡵 Door Locks ........................... 29
▫ Manual Door Locks ................... 29
▫ Power Door Locks .................... 30
▫ Child Protection Door Lock .............. 33
䡵 Windows ............................ 34
▫ Power Windows ...................... 34
▫ Auto-Down — Driver’s Side Only ......... 35
▫ Window Lockout Switch ................ 35
▫ Wind Buffeting ....................... 36
䡵 Occupant Restraints ..................... 36
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 37
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 42
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode
— If Equipped ....................... 43
▫ Center Lap Belts ...................... 44
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped ...... 44
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 45
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 46
▫ Seat Belt Extender ..................... 46
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) –
Airbags ............................ 46
▫ Advanced Front Airbag Features .......... 48
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 52
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 59
▫ Child Restraint ....................... 61
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 74
䡵 Safety Tips ........................... 74
▫ Transporting Passengers ................ 74
▫ Exhaust Gas ......................... 75
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 76
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 77
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the
key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers
can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized
dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers
and keep them in a safe place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission
1. Place the shift lever in PARK.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
Ignition Key
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder. NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become temporarily
trapped in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the
key to the right slightly, then remove the key as de-
scribed. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — ACC 4 — ON/RUN
2 — LOCK 5 — START
3 — OFF
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position, the
steering and ignition systems are locked to provide
antitheft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to
turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your
vehicle. Move the steering wheel left and right while
turning the key until it turns easily. To remove the key:
1. Press and hold the release button located between the
ignition switch and the instrument panel.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
Ignition Release Button
1 — ACC 4 — ON/RUN
2 — LOCK 5 — START
3 — OFF
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key into the door lock cylinder with
either side up. To lock the driver’s door, turn the key
rearward. To unlock the driver’s door, turn the key
forward. For external door lock lubrication, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with-
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved
approximately a half turn in either direction, and the key
is not in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
To Release the Steering Wheel Lock
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACC, or ON position, and
the brake pedal is pressed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
SENTRY KEY姞 — IF EQUIPPED
The Sentry Key威 prevents unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion by disabling the engine. The system does not need to
be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
key to try to start the engine. Either of these conditions
will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key威 is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Du-
plication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
new Sentry Keys威 to the system by performing the
following steps:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
then turn off.
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
grammed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be
reprogrammed.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Ve-
hicle Security Alarm is activated it will provide both
audible and visible signals. The horn will sound repeat-
edly for the three minutes and the headlights, park lamps
and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash
for an additional 15 minutes. The engine will not run
until the Vehicle Security Alarm is disarmed
To Set the Alarm
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
power door locks, or use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is
arming. After the Vehicle Security Alarm is set, the
Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to
indicate that the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed.
NOTE: If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu-
ously during vehicle operation, have the Vehicle Security
Alarm checked by an authorized dealer.
To Disarm the System
Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door. If something
has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence,
the horn will sound three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if the vehicle
is started with a programmed Sentry Key威. If an unpro-
grammed Sentry Key威 is used to start a vehicle, the
engine will run for two seconds and then shut down.
After six unsuccessful attempts at starting the engine, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will shut down until the correct
key is used. To exit alarming mode, press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button or start the vehicle with a
programmed Sentry Key威.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
transmitter, the alarm will sound when you pull the door
handle to exit.
NOTE: You may accidentally activate the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm (horn sounds and lights flash) by entering the
vehicle without using the RKE transmitter to unlock the
door(s). The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed with
the RKE transmitter unlock button or by inserting a
programmed Sentry Key威 into the ignition and turning
the key to the ON position.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks
All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the
doors are unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the
last door is closed, or until all doors are closed and either
the ignition is turned to the ON position or a RKE
transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the
interior lights off after eight minutes if the ignition is OFF
and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the
interior lights ON position.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approxi-
mately 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
1 — Lock
2 — Unlock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice
to unlock all the doors. When the unlock button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash twice.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first unlock button press by using the following
procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button for at least 4 sec-
onds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold
the UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to
indicate that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved, or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors
are locked the parking lights will flash on once and the
horn will chirp once.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Horn Chirp Programming
The horn chirp feature is shipped from the assembly
plant activated. If desired, this feature can be disabled by
using the following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on the RKE trans-
mitter.
2. After holding the LOCK button for four seconds, also
press the PANIC button within six seconds. A single
chime will sound to indicate that this feature has
changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
5. Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the vehicle
by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition in the OFF position and the key
removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm System.
6. If the desired programming was not achieved, or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Flash Lamps With Lock Programming
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter.
2. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the LOCK button within six seconds. A single
chime will sound to indicate that this feature has
changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
4. Test the Flash Lamps With Lock feature while outside
of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter with the ignition in the OFF position and the
key removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm System.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved, or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Using The Panic Alarm
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF,
press and release the PANIC button on the RKE trans-
mitter once. When the Panic mode is activated, the
interior lights will illuminate, the headlights and parking
lights will flash, and the horn will sound.
To cancel the Panic mode, press and release the PANIC
button on the RKE transmitter a second time. Panic mode
will automatically cancel after three minutes, or if the
vehicle is started or exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). During
the Panic Mode, the door locks and RKE systems will
function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the Ve-
hicle Security Alarm System, on vehicles so equipped.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
of battery is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
elastomer seal during removal.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on battery to the + sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
tighten the screw until snug. Test the RKE transmitter
operation.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How to Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Hazard switch off
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
•
The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
•
Any engine warning lamps come on
•
The hood is opened
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
•
The hazard switch is pressed
•
The transmission is moved out of PARK
•
The brake pedal is pressed
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time,
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
to the ON position.
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON position in
order to drive the vehicle.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
All the doors can be manually locked from the inside by
pushing down the door lock plunger, located on the door
trim panel. Both front doors may be opened from the
inside with the door lock plunger in the down or locked
position.
Manual Door Lock Plunger
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key
is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key,
or closing the door, will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
the driver’s door is open, as a reminder to remove the
key.
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h).
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure.)
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON position and back to LOCK position,
a minimum of four times; ending in the LOCK position.
(Do not start the engine.)
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door LOCK
switch in the LOCK direction.
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Auto Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
any door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle
has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle
has been driven (shifted out of PARK and the doors
closed).
Auto Unlock Feature Programming
The Customer Programming sequence to disable or en-
able Auto Unlock:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all the doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may be confusing during this
programming procedure.)
3. Insert the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON position and back to LOCK position,
a minimum of four times; ending in the LOCK position.
(Do not start the engine.)
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door LOCK
switch in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
7. To reactivate the feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be changed. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the child-
protection door lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, slide the lever up
to engage the locks, and down to disengage the child-
protection locks. When the system on a door is engaged,
that door can only be opened by using the outside door
handle, even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE:
•
After setting the child protection door lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
Child Lock Lever
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The control on the left front door has up-down switches
that give you finger-tip control of all the power windows.
There is a single opening and closing switch on the
passenger doors for passenger window control. The
windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON or ACC position, and for ten minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s door is opened.
Power Window Switch
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Auto-Down — Driver’s Side Only
The driver’s window switch has an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the
up or down direction and release the switch.
Window Lockout Switch
The Window Lockout Switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
press the Window Lockout button a second time.
Power Window Lockout Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down or partially open. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs
with the rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
— if equipped
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
•
Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event — if equipped
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature can be used to hold infant
and child restraint systems. For more information on
LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH).
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions, except the front center seating
position (with full bench seat), have combination lap/
shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to
lock during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt
will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate
Latch Plate To Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING!
•
A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and
have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats, the shoulder
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help
position the belt away from your neck. Push in on the
anchorage release button to release the anchorage, and
then move it up or down to the position that fits you best.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage (Extended Cab)
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it down to make sure that it is
locked in the desired position.
NOTE: The adjuster has an easy up (EZ Up) feature,
which will allow it to be moved up without engaging the
button.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position.
Children 12 years old and younger should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat.
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt from the
buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensi-
tive (emergency) locking mode.
Center Lap Belts
The center seat position on the front seat bench has a lap
belt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch plate into
the buckle until you hear a “click.” To lengthen the lap
belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack, pull the
loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against
the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust the belt
as tightly as is comfortable.
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
ers are single use items. After a collision deploys the
airbags and/or pretensioners, a deployed airbag and/or
pretensioner must be replaced immediately.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert威 will alert
the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also
instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert威 will con-
tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for
96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer, or by following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrylser LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert威.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to
signify that you have successfully completed the
programming.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
extender. This extender should be used only if the
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) – Airbags
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win-
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.
Advanced Front Airbags
1 — Airbags
2 — Knee Bolsters
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Front Airbag
•
Front Passenger Airbag
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
— if equipped
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners — if equipped
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the impact sensors
at the front of the car.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the
airbag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash
severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC airbags offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
•
Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
•
Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the
SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu-
pant protection.
WARNING!
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block
the location of the SABIC. The area where the side
curtain airbag is located should remain free from
any obstructions.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for
the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
Children 12 years old and younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
front airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severe
injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Airbags room to inflate.
Do not lean against the door. If your vehicle has side
airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags will
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance⬙.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Airbags need
room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel.
•
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC air-
bags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners —
if equipped, as required, depending on severity and type
of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex-
pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of collision.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating airbag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START
or ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the
ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not
on and will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately six to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation
rates are possible, based on the collision type and sever-
ity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out
of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The bags
fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about
half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on severity and
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC
airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
Front and Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining appropriate response to impact events. Ad-
ditional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag
deployment and provide verification.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
If a Deployment Occurs
The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modi-
fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
vice. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-
ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify an
advanced airbag system for persons with disabili-
ties, contact your authorized dealer.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for
approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
•
The light remains on after the approximate six to
eight-second interval.
•
The light comes on and remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-
speed deceleration data or change in velocity during
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be re-
quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com-
pany or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
Group LLC product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that are recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Vehicle speed
•
Engine RPM
•
Brake switch status
•
Pedal position
•
And other parameters depending on vehicle
configuration
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children
12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in
a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can become
so great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
Infants and Small Children
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the seat belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. (Refer to “LATCH - Child
Seat Anchorage System”.)
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag
that does not have a switch to turn the airbag Off. An
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death
to infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
•
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who
are older than one year, can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and are
older than one year old. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the seat belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. (Refer to “LATCH - Child
Seat Anchorage System”.)
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they need a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
•
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt
in a rear seat.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat of a vehicle that does not have
an airbag off switch. A rearward-facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag, which may cause se-
vere or fatal injury to the infant.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. The manufacturer recommends that you
try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will
use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
The Extended Cab first, and Crew Cab second row
outside seating positions, have cinching latch plates.
These are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch
plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching
latch plate will keep the belt tight; however, any seat
belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally and pull it tight, if necessary.
•
Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren) — if equipped
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child
restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH-
compatible child restraint systems are now available.
However, because the lower anchorages are to be intro-
duced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
available for some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage
of all the available attachments provided with your child
restraint in any vehicle.
Extended Cab
•
The Extended Cab front and right rear (if equipped
with a rear seat) passenger seating positions have
lower anchorages for LATCH-equipped child re-
straints.
LATCH Anchors
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Crew Cab
•
The Crew Cab second row seat has lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-
compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-
mounted lower attachments at all three seating posi-
tions. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must
be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless
of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER install
LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats
share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear
seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but
you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center
position.
If your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible,
you can only install the child restraints using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Refer to “Installing the LATCH-
Compatible Child Restraint System”.
LATCH Anchors
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System — if equipped
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system. The rear
seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, and are
just visible when you lean into the vehicle to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your
finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat
cushion surfaces. In addition, there are tether strap
anchorages at each LATCH seating position (Refer to
“Child Restraint Tether Anchor”.) Many, but not all,
restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps
on each side, with each having a hook or connector for
attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of
adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler
restraints, and some rear-facing infant restraints, will also
be equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to
the tether strap anchorage, and a means of adjusting the
tension of the strap. You will first loosen the adjusters on
the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
LATCH Anchors
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
anchorages. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors
over the top of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat
cover material. Then, attach the tether strap to the
anchorage located on the back of the seat, being careful to
route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchor and the child restraint. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint and route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two posts. Finally,
tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-
ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint, so that it should not be necessary to use a
locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate,
pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will
keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull
it tight if necessary. Pull the belt from the retractor until
there is enough to allow you to pass through the child
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then,
pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor.
Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling on the
excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the
child restraint. For automatic locking retractor seat belts,
refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Mode⬙. If you have trouble
tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint
because, the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt
path opening on the restraint, follow these steps. If the
buckle is webbing-mounted, disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt to
shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out. If the belt still can’t be tight-
ened, the buckle is not webbing-mounted, or if pulling
and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may
need to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle, turn the latch plate around, and insert
the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t
make the child restraint secure, try a different seating
position or use the locking clip provided with your child
restraint. To complete the child seat installation, refer to
⬙Child Restraint Tether Anchor⬙.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
The Extended Cab model has one routing strap
located at the bottom of the front passenger
seat side, rear outboard seating position. The
tether anchor itself is located in the center of
vehicle, in between the two seating positions. The front
outboard passenger seating position is also equipped
with a child tether anchorage, located at the base of the
front seatback. When there is a rear seat delete option, the
tether anchorage located on the cab back panel is de-
signed to be used for the front seat center seating
position. The Crew Cab model has three anchorages
located behind each of the rear seating positions (rear left,
rear center, and rear right).
WARNING!
•
With a child restraint installed in the rear passen-
ger side locations, use care when adjusting the
front seat(s) rearward, to avoid the front seatback
coming in contact with the belted child directly
behind the seat. The child could be injured.
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure the child restraint tether strap is
always routed through the proper anchor strap
inner loop.
Tether Strap at the Front Passenger Seat (Extended Cab)
1. Route the child restraint tether strap up and over the
front passenger seatback, and under the head restraint.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Connect the tether strap to the lower anchor located at
the bottom rear of the seat.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that it is pulled
tight.
Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Extended Cab)
1. Route the child restraint tether strap through the
routing loop, located directly behind the child restraint.
The routing loops are located behind the flip-down door
on the cab back panel (padded bolster).
Tether Strap
Tether Strap Routing Loop
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
2. Route the tether strap across to the center tether
anchorage. The center tether is located behind the slide
door in the center of the vehicle, between the two seating
positions.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that the anchor
strap is pulled tight.
Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Crew Cab)
1. Route the child restraint tether strap under the head
restraint for the outboard seating positions, and then
through the anchor strap outer loop (webbing material
loop), located directly behind the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap across to the nearest installed
anchor strap, and attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor strap inner metal ring.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that both
anchor straps are pulled tight.
NOTE: Two anchors must be used for any of the three
seating positions.
Tether Strap Routing
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor
positions directly behind the child restraint to secure
a child restraint top tether strap. See your authorized
dealer for help, if necessary.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Multiple Child Restraints
1 — Inner Anchor Strap Rings 4 — Passenger Side Rear Child
Seat
2 — Snap Hook 5 — Center Rear Child Seat
3 — Tether Strap 6 — Drivers Side Rear Child
Seat
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
(Continued)
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors .............................. 83
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 83
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 84
▫ Outside Mirrors ...................... 84
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped ......................... 85
▫ Power Mirrors ....................... 85
䡵 Uconnect™ phone — If Equipped ........... 86
▫ Operation .......................... 88
▫ Phone Call Features ................... 97
▫ Uconnect™ phone Features ............. 100
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 104
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ phone .................... 106
▫ General Information .................. 115
䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped ........... 115
▫ Voice Command System Operation ........ 115
▫ Commands ........................ 117
3
▫ Voice Training ...................... 120
䡵 Seats .............................. 120
▫ Manual Seat Adjustment ............... 121
▫ Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners ........ 121
▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment —
If Equipped ........................ 122
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints —
Front Seating Positions ................ 123
▫ Six-Way Power Seat Adjuster
(Driver’s Side Only) .................. 124
▫ Extended Cab/Crew Cab Rear Seat ....... 126
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 126
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood ............ 127
䡵 Lights ............................. 129
▫ Interior Lights ...................... 129
▫ Battery Saver ....................... 130
▫ Headlight Delay ..................... 131
▫
Headlights, Parking Lights And Panel Lights
. . 131
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 132
▫ Lights-On Reminder .................. 132
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 132
▫ Cargo Light — If Equipped ............. 133
▫ Multifunction Lever .................. 133
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 135
▫ Windshield Wipers ................... 135
▫ Windshield Washers .................. 136
䡵 Tilt Steering Column ................... 137
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 138
▫ To Activate ......................... 139
▫ To Set a Desired Speed ................ 139
▫ To Deactivate ....................... 139
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 139
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 139
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .............. 140
䡵 Overhead Console ..................... 141
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights .............. 142
䡵 Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer . . . 142
▫ US/M Button ....................... 142
▫ Reset Button ........................ 143
▫ Step Button ........................ 143
▫ Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) ....... 144
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) .............. 144
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) ................. 145
▫ Elapsed Time (ET) ................... 145
▫ C/T Button ........................ 145
▫ Global Reset ........................ 146
▫ Compass/Temperature Display .......... 146
▫ Automatic Compass Calibration .......... 146
▫ Manual Compass Calibration ............ 146
▫ To Put Into a Calibration Mode .......... 147
▫ Outside Temperature .................. 148
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 148
▫ Programming HomeLink威 .............. 149
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 152
▫ Using HomeLink威 ................... 152
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button ............................ 153
▫ Security ........................... 153
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 153
▫ General Information .................. 154
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ................. 154
䡵 Cupholders .......................... 156
䡵 Rear Crate ’N Go威 Storage — If Equipped .... 157
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers ............ 159
䡵 Console Features — If Equipped ........... 159
▫ Floor Console Features ................ 159
䡵 Cargo Area Features ................... 161
▫
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails — If Equipped
. . 161
䡵 Rear Window Features .................. 162
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped ..... 162
▫ Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped ...... 163
䡵 Slide-In Campers ...................... 164
▫ Camper Applications .................. 164
▫ General Information .................. 164
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warning-Vehicles
Equipped With A Cap Or Slide-In Campers . . 164
䡵 Tailgate ............................ 165
▫ Tailgate Removal .................... 165
▫
Two–Position Tailgate/Upper Load Platform
. . 166
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Folding outside mirrors are hinged, and may be moved
either forward or rearward, to resist damage.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When you
are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular
phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
Mirror Directions
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Ve r-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Uconnect™ Phone Button
Depending on the vehicle options, either the
radio or the mirror will contain the two control
buttons
(Uconnect™ Phone button) and
(Voice Command button) that will en-
able you to access the system.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellu-
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any Uconnect™
Phone features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press
the
button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a
press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ Phone. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which cellular
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the
button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
•
The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati-
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Cellular Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect™)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu-
lar phone is accessible.
•
Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™
Phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
button and say “Phonebook Download.” The system
prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phone-
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
NOTE:
•
The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the
button while the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
⬙Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the
button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
cellular phone. Press the
button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling
Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the button
while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,
as described under ⬙Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second call has established,
press and hold the
button until you hear a double
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the cellular phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
OFF.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and
say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cellular phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
Uconnect™ Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the cellular phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the Uconnect™
Phone.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
⬙Towing Assistance⬙ coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),youcan
press the
button and say, ⬙3746#Send.⬙ Saying
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is
also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,⬙ you
could press the
button and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The Uconnect™ Phone will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
button
and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect™ Phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular
phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the
button and
say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sec-
tions for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a
paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode):
•
Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
•
Press the button and say the ⬙Setup, Voice
Training⬙ command.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
Uconnect™ Phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Command system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Command
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
•
Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Phone Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be reestablished by switching the
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
When you press the Voice Command
button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the Voice Command
button, listen
for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
Command
button and say “Help” or “Main
Menu”.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the Voice
Command
button to stop playing memos. You
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Language German”
•
“Language Dutch”
•
“Language Italian”
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
•
“Voice Training”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Press the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. Proper use of the seats is needed for safe
operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Adjustment
The adjusting lever is at the front of the seat, near the
floor. Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners
The front seats are equipped with recliners. The reclining
mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right
side of the passenger’s seat and the left side of the
driver’s seat. To recline, lean forward slightly before
lifting the lever, then push back to the desired position
and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to
Adjusting Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
return the seatback to its normal position. Using body
pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure the seatback is locked.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
Equipped
The manual lumbar support rotary control adjustment is
located on the left side of the driver’s seat. Rotate the
knob to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar
support.
Recline Lever
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Head Restraints — Front Seating
Positions
Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a rear impact. Pull up or push down on the restraints
so that the upper edge is as high as practical, at least to
the level of the ears.
To lower the head restraint, press the release button
located at the base of the head restraint and push down
on the head restraint.
Lumbar Adjustment
Adjustable Head Restraints
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should always be checked prior to operating the
vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in
motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the
vehicle is in PARK.
Six-Way Power Seat Adjuster (Driver’s Side Only)
The power seat controls are located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat cushion. Three switches control the
seat movement. The four-way switch in the center can be
moved forward, backward, up, or down to adjust for the
most comfortable position.
Up, Down, Forward and Rearward
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The seat angle can also be adjusted by using the two
toggle switches, tilting it up or down.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Tilt Adjustment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Extended Cab/Crew Cab Rear Seat
More cargo space is available by lifting up on the rear
seat cushion.
The Crew Cab Rear Seat is a 60/40 split cushion and full
back. Either cushion can be raised, independently.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seat switches are located on the center of the
instrument panel.
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low and none for
Off.
Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
ing. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
If the High-level heating is selected, the system will
automatically switch to Low-level heating after approxi-
mately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time,
the number of indicators illuminated changes from two
to one, indicating the change. Operation on the Low-level
setting also turns Off automatically after approximately
30 minutes.
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. First pull the hood release lever located under the left
side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
2. Then push the safety latch lever up while lifting the
grille with your hand. It is located at the bottom center of
the grille.
Lift the hood, and the gas filled props will hold it open.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center front
edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Secondary Latch Location
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel next to the steering wheel.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
second upward detent position, or if equipped, when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the interior
lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way
down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to
go out. This is also known as the ⬙Party⬙ mode because it
allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of
time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
Headlight Switch Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are re-
quired during the day. If the dimmer control is not in this
position, the audio display may be difficult to read if the
headlights are on during the daytime.
NOTE: Club Cab威/Quad Cab威 models may have an
optional switched dome lamp that is operated by press-
ing the lens.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shed-
ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
15 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for
15 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Dimmer Control
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlight on for
60 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
turned OFF while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off. The headlights will remain
on for 60 seconds. Headlight delay can be cancelled by
either turning the headlight switch on then off, or by
turning the ignition ON.
Headlights, Parking Lights And Panel Lights
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first
position, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are
all turned on. The headlights will turn on when the
switch is rotated to the second position.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started, the transmission is out of the PARK
position and the parking brake is released. This provides
a constant ⬙lights on⬙ condition until the ignition is
turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than normal
intensity. If the parking brake is applied or the transmis-
sion is in the PARK position, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) will turn off.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, courtesy lights or cargo
lights are left on, after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime
will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The Fog Lights are turned on by placing the
headlight rotary control in the parking light or
headlight position and pushing on the headlight
rotary control. The fog lights will operate only when the
parking lights are on, or when the vehicle headlights are
on low beam. An indicator light located in the instrument
cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog
lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second
time, also when the headlight switch is rotated to the off
position, or the high beam is selected.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Light — If Equipped
The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on cargo
button. The cargo lights will also turn on for 30 seconds
when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UN-
LOCK button is pressed, as part of the Illuminated Entry
feature.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Cargo Light Switch
Signaling Turns
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
NOTE:
•
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
•
If a turn signal has been left on for a minimum of
1 mile (1.6 km), a continuous chime will sound.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will turn on the high beam headlights
until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Pull the multifunction lever fully toward the steering
wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam.
High/Low Beam
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the multifunction
lever to select the desired wiper speed.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
Wiper/Washer Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LO continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every two seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
NOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition
is turned OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the
⬙Park⬙ position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers
will resume operation.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end
of the multifunction lever and hold while spray is
desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
knob is pushed, for a period greater than one second
while in the off position, the wiper will wipe approxi-
mately three wipes after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that exceeds
the temperature range of your climate. This rating infor-
mation can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Push the lever away from the steering wheel to lock the
column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The control buttons for the Electronic Speed Control are
located on the steering wheel. When engaged, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation
at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — Resume 4 — Set
2 — Cancel 5 — On/Off
3 — Decel
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con-
trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the
instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates to
indicate that the system is on.
To Set a Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressing
the CANCEL button will deactivate the speed control
without erasing the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF but-
ton to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases
the memory.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control ON when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
Electronic Speed Control to cause it to go faster than
you want. You could lose control and have an acci-
dent. Always leave the system OFF when you are not
using it.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control System is ON, the
speed can be increased by pressing and holding the
RESUME/ACCEL button. When the button is released, a
new set speed will be established.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed
increase of 1 mph (2 km/h). Each time the button is
tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button three
times will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h).
Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed
decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h). Each time the button is
tapped, speed will decrease. For example, tapping the
button three times will decrease the speed by 3 mph
(4.8 km/h).
To decrease the speed while the Electronic Speed Control
is on, press and hold the DECEL button. Release the
button when the desired speed is reached, and the new
speed will be set.
To Accelerate for Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000 ft
(610 m), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded (especially
when towing) the vehicle may slow below the SET speed.
If the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph (40 km/h), the
Electronic Speed Control will automatically disengage. If
this happens, you can push down on the accelerator
pedal to maintain the desired speed.
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may
exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions.
To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im-
prove vehicle performance, it is advisable to lock out
OVERDRIVE by pressing the TOW/HAUL button lo-
cated at the end of the shift lever.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console has the following features:
•
Courtesy Lights
•
Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
•
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer — If
Equipped
Overhead Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Near the front of the console are two courtesy/reading
lights.
Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing the
recessed area of the corresponding lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF, they will
extinguish after approximately 10 minutes.
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER
This feature allows you to choose between a compass/
temperature display and one of four trip conditions being
monitored.
US/M Button
Use the US/M button to change the display from U.S. to
metric measurement units.
US/M Button
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
RESET Button
Use the RESET button to reset the following displays:
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Trip Odometer
•
Elapsed time.
STEP Button
Use the STEP button to choose, or cycle through, the four
trip conditions.
RESET Button
STEP Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Displays the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average fuel economy is a running average of the
amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle has
traveled. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will
momentarily blank, the history will be erased, and the
AVERAGE WILL CONTINUE FROM WHERE IT WAS
BEFORE THE RESET. The reset value is based on a
minimal amount of fuel used and the distance traveled
from the previous drive cycle. The display may take
several miles/kilometers for this value to change, de-
pending upon driving habits.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. The estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level.
NOTE: The DTE is not resettable.
When Distance To Empty = LOW FUEL, the fuel gauge
pointer will initially be on the red “E” marker. At this
point (fuel gauge pointer on the red “E” marker), there is
reserve fuel capacity, which corresponds to approxi-
mately 8% of tank volume. This reserve capacity was put
in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running
out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions
in areas where there aren’t many gas stations.
NOTE: The Distance To Empty will remain equal to zero
until the vehicle runs out of fuel or is refueled.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset.
NOTE: The maximum value is approximately
6000 miles (9656 km).
Resetting of this screen will cause the trip odometer to
change to zero. Then the trip odometer must be reset in
order to update the trip odometer miles.
Elapsed Time (ET)
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
since the last reset. Resetting the Elapsed Time will cause
the display to change to zero.
C/T Button
Use the C/T (Compass/Temperature) button to select a
readout of the outside temperature and one of eight
compass headings that indicate the direction in which the
vehicle is facing.
The system will display the last known outside tempera-
ture when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven
several minutes before the updated temperature is dis-
played. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed
temperature, therefore temperature readings are not up-
dated when the vehicle is not moving.
C/T Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Global Reset
If the RESET button is pressed twice within two seconds
while in any of the three resettable displays (AVG ECO,
ODO, ET), the GLOBAL RESET will reset all three
displays.
Compass/Temperature Display
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32°
F (0° C), the road surface may be icy, particularly in
woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per-
sonal injury or property damage.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL
symbol will be displayed.
After completing one 360 degree turn with the vehicle
traveling less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn
off and the compass will function normally.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the Overhead Console. This is where the compass sensor
is located.
Manual Compass Calibration
NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make
sure the compass variance is properly set before manu-
ally calibrating the compass.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does
not appear, you must manually put the compass into the
“Calibration” mode.
To Put Into a Calibration Mode
Turn the ignition ON and set the display to “Compass/
Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button to
change the display between VAR (compass variance) and
CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL sym-
bol is displayed, complete one 360 degree turn in an area
free from large metal objects or power lines. The CAL
symbol will turn off and the compass will function
normally.
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
according to the Compass Variance Map.
To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the
display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press and hold the
RESET button approximately five seconds. The last vari-
ance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP
button to select the new variance zone and press the
RESET button to resume normal operation.
Compass Variance Map
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Outside Temperature
Because the ambient temperature sensor is located under
the hood, engine temperature can influence the displayed
temperature; therefore, temperature readings are slowly
updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h) or during stop-and-go driving.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off of your vehi-
cle’s battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
console, and contain one, two or three dots/lines desig-
nating the different HomeLink威 channels.
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Theft
Alarm is active.
HomeLink Buttons
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety infor-
mation or assistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) illuminates
the HomeLink威 symbol (a house with an arrow inside it)
along with 1, 2 or 3 indicators under it, when a
HomeLink威 button is pressed.
Pay attention to the indicator(s), as they will flash at
different rates, or remain solid during training.
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds. Release the buttons when the indicators start
to flash.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the
HomeLink威 display in view.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLink威.
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威button and the handheld transmitter button
until the indicator(s) change from a slow to a rapid flash
rate.
Then release both the HomeLink威 and handheld trans-
mitter buttons.
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.
If the signal is too weak to train, replace the battery in the
handheld transmitter.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
the indicator(s) blink rapidly for two seconds and then
remains constant, continue with the next section: “Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code System”.
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading, “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you are have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink,” Step 3, with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indica-
tor(s) will change from a slow flash to a rapid flash
when trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under, “Programming
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for
20 seconds until the indicator(s) starts to flash. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink威, Step #2, and follow all remaining
steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicators begin to flash. Note that
all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com, for information or assistance.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC” before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
This vehicle has two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power
outlets that can provide power for accessories designed
for use with standard power outlet adapters. The power
outlets are located in the instrument panel (below the
temperature control setting knob) and inside the full-size
center console.
Instrument Panel Outlet
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is used,
it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically
when ready for use. To preserve the heating element, do
not hold the lighter in the heating position.
NOTE:
•
To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
element must be used.
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in, draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Use these only inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CUPHOLDERS
If your vehicle has bucket seats with a center console,
there are three cupholders located on the console.
Front Cup Holders — Crew Cab
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A two-cavity cupholder is available on all Crew Cabs,
with rear seats mounted on the floor.
REAR CRATE ’N GO姞 STORAGE — IF EQUIPPED
The rear Crate ’n Go威 storage, located under the rear seat
lower cushion, consists of two removable, collapsible
storage crates.
To open the crates, lift upward on the crate handles and
engage the crate end flaps.
Rear Cup Holders — Crew Cab
Open Crate
1 — Crate Handles
2 — Crate End Flaps
3 — Release Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
To remove the crate, press on the release lever, located on
the ends of the base, and lift up on the crate.
To install the crate into the base, insert the crate into the
inboard slot and push down on the outboard side of the
crate, then snap into place.
To collapse the crate, push the crate end flaps inward to
disengage. Push the sides inward and snap into place.
WARNING!
Do not sit or stand on this crate. It may collapse
causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Do not lift up on the “End Flaps” to open the crate,
damage to the “End Flaps” may occur.
NOTE: The maximum loading capacity for the small
crate is 30 lbs (13.6 kg) and 50 lbs (22.6 kg) for the large
crate.
Insert Crate
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
Retainer hooks, which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles, are built into the back panel of the cab.
CONSOLE FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED
Floor Console Features
The Floor Console between the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s seat has the following features:
•
Miscellaneous storage compartments.
•
Three cupholders (two removable).
•
iPod/Phone storage bin.
•
12 Volt power outlet inside storage compartment.
•
Side open armrest lid.
•
Tissue holder and two pen holders.
•
Coin slots (located under the instrument panel center
stack).
Grocery Bag Retainers
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Storage Compartments
Some miscellaneous storage compartments and cuphold-
ers are both removable and dishwasher safe (upper rack
of dishwasher only) for cleaning purposes. Various stor-
age compartments provide versatile and useful storage.
A coin holder is also provided inside the driver side
storage bin.
Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage
The console is equipped with a power outlet and an
iPod/phone storage bin. The phone storage bin can be
used when easy access to the phone is needed. Also, the
power outlet inside the console compartment can be used
to charge the phone while it is being stored in the bin. The
power outlet may be used for any portable item with a
standard 12 Volt power plug.
Side Open Armrest Lid
Pressing the button on the left side of the console opens
the console armrest lid. The armrest lid will remain open
until the armrest lid is closed manually, by pressing the
lid back into place. Two pen holders are provided on the
inside of the armrest lid. A tissue holder is also provided
on the inside of the armrest lid, which holds a pocket-size
soft pack of tissue.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails — If Equipped
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
320 lbs (145 kg) and the angle of the load on each
cleat should not exceed 60 degrees above horizontal,
or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
There are four adjustable cleats that can be used to assist
in securing cargo. Each cleat must be located and tight-
ened down in one of the detent’s, along either rail, in
order to keep cargo properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull
out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the
desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the
detent and tighten the nut.
1 — Utility Rail Cleat
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Detent
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end
cap by pushing up on the locking tab, located on the
bottom of the end cap. Slide the cleat off the end of the
rail.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
The rear window defroster button is located on the
right-side of the Air Conditioning and Heater
Control, below the A/C (snowflake) button. Press this
button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the
button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five
minutes of operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Utility Rail End Cap
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
Sliding Rear Window Latch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load-
ing document, located in your Owner’s Manual packet or
available from your authorized dealer. For safety reasons,
follow all instructions on this important document.
General Information
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body
modifications and special equipment, such as a camper
unit, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc., supplied by
manufacturers other than Chrysler LLC. For warranty
coverage and service on these items, contact the appli-
cable manufacturer.
To mount a camper unit with an overhang, the tailgate
can be removed. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the
support cables from the retainer pins. Raise the right side
of the tailgate until the lower right side pivot clears the
hanger bracket. Then slide the tailgate to the right to
remove.
Carbon Monoxide Warning-Vehicles Equipped
With A Cap or Slide-In Campers
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the
exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the overhang-
ing camper compartment and be free of leaks.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TAILGATE
Tailgate Removal
To simplify mounting a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed quickly. Follow these steps:
1. Open the tailgate to a 45 degree angle.
2. Unclip and remove the cables from the box while
maintaining a 45 degree angle.
3. Lift the tailgate off of the pivot on the passenger side
by pulling upward and rearward at the same time.
4. Slide the tailgate to the passenger side while making
sure clearance from the box and taillight is maintained.
Tailgate Cable
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
To reinstall the tailgate, do the following:
1. Slide the tailgate onto the driver’s side pivot.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and insert it into
the passenger side pivot.
3. Clip the cables to the box.
Two–Position Tailgate/Upper Load Platform
Your tailgate can be opened to the full-open or the
partial-open position. The partial-open position is for
loading objects longer than the length of the bed (sheets
of plywood, etc.) by creating an upper load platform:
Installing Lumber
1. Place lumber across the box in the indentations pro-
vided above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead
dividers, to form the floor. There are indents in the sheet
metal (or bed liner if equipped) on the inner side of the
box in front (Club Cab威 only) and behind both wheel
housings.
2. Secure the tailgate in the partially-open position:
3. Open the tailgate slightly.
1 — Bulkhead Divider Slot
2 — Wheel Housing Indentions
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Snap the tailgate support cable between the cable
guide and the tailgate bumper. Do this on both sides of
the tailgate.
To return the tailgate to the full-open position:
1. Lift up on the tailgate.
2. Remove both cables from between the cable guides
and the tailgate bumpers, and lower the tailgate.
CAUTION!
•
Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with cargo. Vehicle speeds may need to be
reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may cause
shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may result in
vehicle damage.
•
Ensure the load is securely tied down and is
properly identified according to local laws if it
extends beyond the tail lights.
•
Loading should not exceed 400 lbs (181 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse and
partially open tailgate or vehicle damage may
result.
Tailgate Guide
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features ............... 172
䡵 Instrument Cluster .................... 173
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 174
䡵 Electronic Digital Clock ................. 187
▫ Clock Setting Procedure ............... 187
䡵 Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) .................. 188
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ...... 188
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 196
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ....... 198
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ......... 201
▫ Info Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ......... 201
4
䡵 Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — If Equipped .................... 203
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped ................. 204
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ phone
— If Equipped ...................... 204
▫
Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
...... 204
▫
Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio
. . 206
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)....... 208
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 208
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 211
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 213
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 216
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)
And Sirius Radio ...................... 217
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 217
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 223
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 225
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 227
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 228
䡵 Sound Box Operation ................... 229
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU/RBZ
Radios Only) ......................... 230
▫ System Activation .................... 230
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 230
▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode ..................... 231
▫ Satellite Antenna ..................... 231
▫ Reception Quality .................... 231
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite) Mode ............. 232
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ phone
(If Equipped) ....................... 234
▫ Operating Instructions —
Video Entertainment System (VES)™
(If Equipped) ....................... 234
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped .......................... 235
▫ Radio Operation ..................... 235
▫ CD Player ......................... 236
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 236
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ....... 237
䡵 Climate Controls ...................... 237
▫ Air Conditioning And Heater ............ 237
▫ Operating Tips ...................... 240
▫ Operation Tips Chart ................. 243
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Headlight Switch 6 — Glove Compartment 11 — Transfer Case Switch*
2 — Air Outlets 7 — Radio 12 — Speed Control Switches
3 — Demister Outlets 8 — Climate Controls 13 — Hood Release
4 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Power Outlet 14 — Parking Brake Release
5 — Airbags 10 — Heated Seat Switches* * If Equipped
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The
gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or
when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en-
gine running as you would not be able to react to the
temperature gauge if the engine overheats.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
When a turn signal is activated, a right-pointing or
left-pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the
direction of the turn. These indicators also indicate
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal,
check for a defective bulb. If either indicator fails to light
up when the lever is moved, check for a defective fuse or
turn signal LED. A single chime is activated when the
left/right turn signal is left on, with the vehicle speed
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for more than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
The low fuel warning light will illuminate when the
fuel gauge reads 1/8 of a tank or less. There is a
pointer on the side of this symbol that indicates the
side that your fuel filler door is located.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. High Beam Indicator
The high beam indicator will illuminate if the
headlights are on high beam.
6. Seat Belt Reminder Light
The seat belt reminder light will illuminate for
several seconds after the ignition is turned ON as
a reminder to “buckle up.” This light will remain
on as long as the seat belt remains unbuckled. If this light
flashes, it indicates a fault in the seat belt system. Have
the system checked by an authorized dealer. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
7. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H (Hot), this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
threshold. Further overheating will cause the tempera-
ture gauge to pass H (Hot), the indicator will continu-
ously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the
engine is allowed to cool.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature light is on,
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until
the light turns off. If the light remains on, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Fol-
low the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
8. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed.
9. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
10. Vehicle Security Light
The vehicle security light will flash rapidly for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security alarm is arming. The light will flash at
a slower speed continuously after the alarm is
set. The security light will also come on for about three
seconds when the ignition is first turned ON.
11. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will illuminate when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the ON position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not illuminate when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
12. Oil Pressure Warning Light
The Oil Pressure Warning Light illuminates when
the engine oil pressure has become too low. For a
bulb check, this light will come on momentarily when the
ignition is turned ON. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. Immediate service should be obtained.
13. Tachometer
The tachometer gauge measures engine revolutions-per-
minute (RPM x 1000).
14. Shift Lever Indicator
The electronic shift lever indicator is self-contained
within the instrument cluster. It displays the position of
the automatic transmission shift lever, and the relation of
each position to all other positions. The display will place
a box around the selected transmission range (PRND21).
If the PRNDL displays only the characters PRND21 (no
boxes), have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
15. Trip Odometer
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometer, press and release
the trip odometer button.
To reset a trip odometer, display the trip odometer then
push and hold the button until the display resets (ap-
proximately two seconds).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the odometer:
door .............................Door Ajar
gASCAP ....................... Fuel Cap Fault
LoW tirE.....................LowTirePressure
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL ...............OilChange Required
LoW WASH .................. LowWasher Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Overhead Console with
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer, some ve-
hicle messages may display in the Overhead Console
with Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer when
the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to Overhead Con-
sole with Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
cycles.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Igni-
tion Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For further information on fuses and fuse
locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CHAngE OIL Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
16. Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
17. Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
The fog light indicator illuminates when the fog
lights are on.
18. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature, that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEU-
TRAL, until the light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
In some circumstances a Transmission Temperature
Warning Light, under continued operation, could
cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
19. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) – If Equipped
The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) light
informs you of a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. If the light remains
lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine
is running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON
and remain on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light
does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
20. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
21. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) that
monitors the emissions and engine control sys-
tem. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light
will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and
remain on, as a bulb check, until the engine is started. If
the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing, the light
will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and
remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5 seconds, and
remain on until the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not
come on during starting, have the condition investigated
promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
23. Airbag Warning Light
The airbag warning light will illuminate and
remain lit for six to eight seconds when the
ignition is first turned ON. If the light does not
illuminate when the ignition is first turned ON,
or the light stays on or comes on while driving, have the
airbag system checked by an authorized dealer. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
24. 4WD Indicator
This light indicates the vehicle is in four-wheel
drive and 4LOCK. 4WD allows all four wheels
to receive torque from the engine simulta-
neously.
25. SVC (Service) 4WD Indicator
The SVC 4WD illuminates when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position and will stay on for two
seconds. If the light stays on or illuminates during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
26. Cruise Indicator
The cruise indicator illuminates when the electronic
speed control system is turned on.
27. Cargo Lamp
The Cargo Lamp indicator will illuminate
when the Cargo Lamp is activated by pressing
the CARGO button, located on the headlight
switch.
28. TOW/HAUL
The TOW/HAUL button is located at the end of the gear
shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW/
HAUL button has been selected.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
29. 4WD LOW Indicator
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to-
gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.
30. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
Press the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button to
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer
display. Holding the button in, resets the trip odometer
reading.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
model), whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position.
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, or when
the radio frequency is being displayed, timekeeping is
accurately maintained.
On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio, the time button
alternates the location of the time and frequency on the
display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio, only one
of the two, time or frequency, is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/AUDIO con-
trol knob.
3. After the hours are adjusted, push the TUNE/AUDIO
control knob to set the minutes.
4. Adjust the minutes by turning the TUNE/AUDIO
control knob.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait approximately
five seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
REQ Radio
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues SoftR&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
•
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
•
Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
•
Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE:
•
The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
•
These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
•
VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
•
VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
•
VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Command” in “Understand-
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
For Uconnect™ “Voice Command,” refer to “Uconnect™
Phone” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)”.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD
player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD).
Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm)
touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ
user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Command” in “Understand-
ing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
To Manually Set the Clock
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock
setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio
Uconnect威 gps — RER Only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
RES Radio
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX
JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
RES/RSC Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea-
tures If Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit
to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
(Continued)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign a
number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features If Your Vehicle”.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)”.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SOUND BOX OPERATION
The Sound Box includes one subwoofer, two tweeters
and lights that pulsate with the music.
The lights can be: turned off, on constantly, or pulse with
the beat of the music. To control the lights, select one of
the following three positions:
Switch Position Light Operation
1
Pulse (right/passenger
side) position – In this
position the sound is ac-
tive and the lights will
pulse with the music.
2
Pulse off/light off (center)
position – In this position
the sound is active but
the lights will be turned
off.
3
Constant (left/driver side)
position – In this position
the sound is active and
the lights will remain on
constantly.
Sound Box
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU/RBZ
RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER/RBZ Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button (When Equipped)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
song title all of the time (press and hold again to return to
normal display).
INFO Button — REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five sec-
onds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up or down or scan the channels and
the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
Music Type screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down, and
scan will no longer be based on your selection.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The controls for the heating, ventilation and air condi-
tioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
interior conditions.
Air Conditioning and Heater
Air Conditioning and Heater Operation
To turn on the air conditioning, set the fan control at any
speed and press the SNOWFLAKE button located at the
right of the control panel. Conditioned air will be di-
rected through the outlets selected by the mode control.
Air Conditioning and Heater Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
A light at the top of the SNOWFLAKE button shows that
the air conditioning is on. Press the button a second time
to turn the air conditioning off.
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
The Mode Control (at the right of the
control panel) can be set in any of the
following positions:
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots.
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level )
Select the recirculation modes when
the outside air contains dust, odors,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is
desired. This feature allows for recir-
culation of interior air only. Air flows
either through the panel outlets or
both the panel and floor outlets to-
gether, depending on which recirculation mode is
selected.
Panel (Fresh Air Modes)
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
Mode Control
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Floor
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
lets located under the instrument panel.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel.
NOTE: The air conditioner compressor operates in both
Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if the
A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies the
air to help dry the windshield.
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left of the
control panel is the Blower Control.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the blower
off, turn the knob to the far left posi-
tion.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Temperature Control
The rotary knob at the center of the
control panel controls the temperature
of the interior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating the
knob. The coldest temperature setting
is to the extreme left (blue region) and
the warmest setting is to the extreme
right (red region) of the rotation.
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
Side window demisters direct airflow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-
vide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix, Defrost, or Bi-Level modes are
in use.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
Operating Tips
Fast Cooldown
For a fast cooldown, open the windows and turn the
blower fan rotary knob to the extreme right position, turn
the mode control to the panel fresh position, press the
SNOWFLAKE button to turn on the air conditioning, and
drive with the windows open for the first few minutes.
Once the hot air has been expelled, close the windows
and turn the mode selector to the Recirculation Panel
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode or Recirculation Mode Bi-level position. When a
comfortable condition has been reached, choose a mode
position and adjust the temperature control knob and
blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort. For high
humidity conditions it may be necessary to remain in the
Recirculation mode to maintain comfort.
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the SNOW-
FLAKE button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature
control, air direction and blower speed to maintain
comfort.
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode
position on the control. Adjust the temperature control
and blower speed to maintain comfort. High blower
speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the
windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates on the inside of windows can increase the
rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer, to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50%
concentration of engine coolant to distilled water is
recommended. Refer to “Cooling System” under “Main-
tenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy
traffic, in hot weather, especially when towing a trailer,
additional engine cooling may be required. If this situa-
tion is encountered, operate the transmission in a lower
gear and set the air conditioner to recirculation mode.
Operating the air conditioner in recirculation mode pro-
vides the maximum performance from your air condi-
tioning. When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be neces-
sary to shift into NEUTRAL and press the accelerator
slightly for fast idle operation.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
tions. This will help prevent snow going into the ducts.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Tips Chart
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures .................... 249
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 249
▫ Normal Starting ..................... 249
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or –29°C) ................ 250
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ................ 250
▫ After Starting ....................... 251
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 251
䡵 Automatic Transmission ................. 252
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ............. 252
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System ...... 253
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 253
▫ Gear Ranges ........................ 253
䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped . . 258
▫ NV233/243 GII Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions ............... 258
▫ Shifting Procedure – NV233/243 Transfer
Case ............................. 262
5
䡵 Limited-Slip Rear Axle Differential —
If Equipped .......................... 264
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 264
䡵 Driving Through Water ................. 265
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................. 265
▫ Shallow Standing Water ............... 265
䡵 Power Steering ....................... 267
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 268
䡵 Parking Brake ........................ 269
䡵 Brake System ........................ 270
▫ Rear-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . 270
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) —
If Equipped ........................ 271
䡵 Tire Safety Information ................. 273
▫ Tire Markings ....................... 273
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ......... 277
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ......... 278
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 279
䡵 Tires — General Information ............. 283
▫ Tire Pressure ....................... 283
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 284
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 285
▫ Radial Ply Tires ..................... 286
▫ Tire Spinning ....................... 286
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ................. 287
▫ Life Of Tire ........................ 288
▫ Replacement Tires .................... 288
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Tire Chains .......................... 290
䡵 Snow Tires .......................... 292
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 292
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 293
▫ Base System ........................ 296
▫ General Information .................. 298
䡵 Fuel Requirements ..................... 298
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ................ 299
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 299
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 300
▫ MMT In Gasoline .................... 300
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ............... 301
▫ Fuel System Cautions ................. 301
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 302
䡵 Flexible Fuel (4.7L Engine Only) —
If Equipped .......................... 303
▫ E85 General Information ............... 303
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E85) ................... 304
▫ Fuel Requirements ................... 304
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E85) And Gasoline Vehicles ...... 305
▫ Starting ........................... 306
▫ Cruising Range ...................... 306
▫ Replacement Parts ................... 306
▫ Maintenance ........................ 306
䡵 Adding Fuel ......................... 307
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............. 307
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 308
䡵 Vehicle Loading ...................... 309
▫ Certification Label ................... 309
▫ Curb Weight ........................ 310
▫ Loading ........................... 310
䡵 Trailer Towing ........................ 311
▫ Common Towing Definitions ............ 312
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 316
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ........ 317
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ............. 317
▫ Towing Requirements ................. 318
▫ Towing Tips ........................ 323
䡵 Snowplow .......................... 324
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 325
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models .............. 325
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models .............. 325
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the shift lever in NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
pressed to shift out of PARK.
Tip Start Feature
Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait
5 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan-
gerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Start-
ing” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel, in case the engine is flooded.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 sec-
ond periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held
to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should be
repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de-
crease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is located at the right front
of the engine compartment for all engine applications.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key
can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition
is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever
is locked in PARK.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to any other
switch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running or
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Automatic Transmission
The electronic PRNDL on the instrument cluster indicates
the transmission gear selected. The shift lever is mounted
on the right side of the steering column. To drive, move
the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the desired
drive position. Pull the shift lever toward you when
shifting into REVERSE, SECOND, FIRST or PARK, or
when shifting out of PARK.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL position into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever into the PARK position.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully, when parked, to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
DRIVE
This range is for most city and highway driving.
2 (Second)
This range is for driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on
mountain roads where more precise speed control is
desirable, use second gear. Use it also when climbing
long grades, and for engine braking when descending
moderately steep grades. To prevent excessive engine
speed, do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) in this range.
1 (First)
This range is for driving up very steep hills and for
engine braking at low speeds, 25 mph (40 km/h) or less,
when going down hill, use first gear. To prevent excessive
engine speed do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this
range.
Overdrive Operation
The Overdrive automatic transmission contains an
electronically-controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped)
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
gear (Overdrive). The transmission will automatically
shift from Drive to Overdrive, if the following conditions
are present:
•
the shift lever is in DRIVE;
•
the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
perature;
•
vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h);
•
the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;
•
transmission has reached normal operating
temperature.
NOTE:
•
If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures,
the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will
automatically select the most desirable gear for opera-
tion at this temperature. Normal operation will re-
sume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer to “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section.
•
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desir-
able gear for operation at this temperature. If the
transmission temperature becomes hot enough, the
“Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illu-
minate and the transmission may downshift out of
Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
cool down, the transmission will resume normal
operation.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to
DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, top gear is disabled and
some shift patterns are modified. On vehicles with five-
speed transmissions, shifts into Overdrive (fourth gear)
are allowed during steady cruise (for improved fuel
economy), and automatic closed-throttle downshifts to
third gear (for improved braking) will occur during
steady braking.
TOW/HAUL Switch
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
the switch must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included
in all automatic transmissions. A clutch, within the
torque converter, engages automatically at a calibrated
speed at light throttle. It engages at higher speeds under
heavier acceleration. This may result in a slightly differ-
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated
speed, or during acceleration, the clutch automatically
and smoothly disengages. The feature is operational in
Overdrive and in Drive.
NOTE:
•
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm (usu-
ally after 1-3 miles [1.6 - 4.8 km] of driving). Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis-
sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is
normal. Pressing the TOW/HAUL switch, when the
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate
that the transmission is able to shift into, and out of
Overdrive.
•
If the vehicle has not been driven in several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque con-
verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from
PARK into any other gear position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED
NV233/243 GII Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions
The NV233/243 is an electric-shift transfer case and is
operated by the transfer case switch, which is located on
the instrument panel.
The NV233/243 transfer case provides four mode posi-
tions:
•
Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
•
Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
•
Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
•
Neutral (N)
The NV233/243 transfer case is designed to be driven in
the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street
and highway conditions on dry hard-surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by turning the transfer case switch to the
desired position - Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for
further information. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
Transfer Case Switch
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
positions are designed for loose or slippery road surfaces
only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW posi-
tions on dry hard-surfaced roads may cause increased
tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
by pressing the recessed button located on the lower
left-hand corner of the transfer case switch. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational
towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located on the instrument cluster. If there is
no indicator light on or flashing, the transfer case is in
two-wheel drive (2WD). If the indicator light is on, the
desired position (4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW) has been
obtained.
If one or more shift requirements are not met:
1. An indicator light will flash.
2. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the transfer case switch back to the current position, wait
five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for further
information.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
after engine start-up or illuminates during driving, it
means that the four-wheel drive system is not function-
ing properly and that service is required.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV233/243 trans-
fer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and there-
fore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal
for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or
rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the trans-
fer case.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, refer to the following infor-
mation:
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High — This range is used for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard-surfaced roads.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock — This range locks the front and
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This range provides addi-
tional traction for loose or slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low — This range provides low speed
four-wheel drive. It locks the front and rear driveshafts
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
N
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain, and is used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Shifting Procedure – NV233/243 Transfer Case
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift, the indicator light for the previous position
will remain ON, and the newly-selected position indica-
tor light will continue to flash until all the requirements
for the selected position have been met. To retry a shift:
return the transfer case switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds, and try the shift again.
2WD-to-4WD LOCK or 4WD LOCK-to-2WD
Turn the transfer case switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
the vehicle stopped, or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn-
ing the transfer case switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine
either running or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if
the key is in the ACC position.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock Brake
Systems, the four-wheel drive system will not allow
shifts between 2WD/ 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are
spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original posi-
tion indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce
speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
There may be a delay up to 10 seconds for the shift to
complete after the wheels have stopped spinning.
4WD LOCK-to-4WD LOW or 4WD LOW-to-4WD
LOCK
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW, some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), or completely stopped. USE
EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, turn the transfer case switch to the
desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Turn the transfer case switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
•
If Steps 1 or 2 of the Preferred or Alternate Procedure
are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift, or if they
no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in
process, then the indicator light will flash and the
current transfer case position will be maintained. To
retry the selection, turn the transfer case switch back to
the current position, wait five seconds, and retry shift.
•
The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place
and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If
the key is not ON, then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
LIMITED-SLIP REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL — IF
EQUIPPED
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel. It improves traction
when there is a difference between the characteristics of
the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit is
similar to a conventional differential. But on a slippery
surface, the differential delivers more of the driving effort
to the wheel having the better traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differen-
tial, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose
control of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the car in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of con-
tamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in
appearance) after driving through standing water.
Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid
appears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
The foot-operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
NOTE: The “Brake Warning Light” indicates only that
the parking brake is applied. You must be sure the
parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the shift lever is in the PARK position. When parking on
a hill, you should apply the parking brake before placing
the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK.
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that
required with the power system operating.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by
increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal
force required to slow or stop, and activation of the
“Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning Light”
during brake use.
Rear-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Rear-Wheel ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically controls the operation of the
rear brakes to prevent rear wheel lockup.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ABS remains operational in the four-wheel drive
mode. The level of performance is reduced when the
front brakes are locked up. This will cause the rear brakes
to lock-up through the drivetrain, which may reduce the
effectiveness of the anti-lock system.
During severe braking conditions, particularly with
changing road surfaces, such as ice to concrete, a slight
drop or minor pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Both Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated
electronic equipment. It may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or high out-
put radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capabil-
ity. Installation of such equipment should be done by
qualified professionals.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If
Equipped
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber “ABS Warning Light.” When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
the ignition OFF and ON again may reset the ABS if the
fault detected was only momentary.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
WARNING!
•
Anti-Lock Brake Systems (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal, and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4.
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg)
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since5x150
= 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION!
•
The use of chains is permitted only on vehicles
equipped with P245/70R16 tires.
•
Use only “Class S” chains or other traction aids
that meet SAE Type “S” specifications.
•
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires.
•
Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as
recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains,
observe the following precautions:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Because of limited chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro-
ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
•
Install chains as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Do not install tire chains on front wheels of
vehicles.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage. Always use the lower sug-
gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
if different than the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of your
vehicle.
NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted on your
vehicle with P245/70R16 tires.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with
tires other than P245/70R16. There may not be
adequate clearance for the chains and you are
risking structural or body damage to your vehicle.
•
Do not use tire chains on the front wheels of your
vehicle. There may not be adequate clearance for
the chains and you are risking structural or body
damage to your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
SNOW TIRES
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc-
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure (the placard is lo-
cated on the driver’s side B-pillar).
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire
pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold
for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom-
mended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the “TPMS Warning Lamp” to be turned off.
The system will automatically update and the “TPMS
Warning Lamp” will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the “TPMS
Lamp.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “TPMS
Lamp” will still be ON. In this situation, the “TPMS
Lamp” will turn off only after the tires have been inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam-
age. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the tire pressure moni-
toring sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.”
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module
•
Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this
occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. The system will automatically update
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this
information.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur by any of the following scenarios: 1) Jamming due
to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting
the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors; 2) Install-
ing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects
radio wave signals; 3) Lots of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings; 4) Using tire chains on the
vehicle; 5) Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a non-matching
full size spare wheel and tire assembly.
1. This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor-
ing sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire
pressure in the spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound
and the “TPM Telltale Light” will still turn ON due to the
low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPM
Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States ..................... KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
All engines are designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations, and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide, have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC), which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-
fications, if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline, referred to as “Reformulated Gaso-
line.” Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and
are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines.
Properly-blended reformulated gasolines will provide
excellent performance and durability for the engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country, during the
Winter months, to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Methanol.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look
for gasolines without MMT in Canada, because MMT can
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United
States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There-
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance, damage the emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully,
loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the
temperature is high, use a premium unleaded fuel
to help prevent spark knock. If spark knock per-
sists, lighten the load, or engine piston damage
may result.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Many of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel Ve-
hicles (FFV) only. These vehicles can be identified by the
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
E85 Fuel Cap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E85.
Ethanol Fuel (E85)
E85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
E85 Badge
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-
ing between E85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-
mended.
When you do switch fuel types, it is recommended that:
•
you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
•
you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
•
Use seasonally adjusted E85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E85 fuel, you may experience
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
•
Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E85) and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Starting
The characteristics of E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E85 startability when the ambient tempera-
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
If you operate the vehicle using E85 fuel, follow the
maintenance schedule section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door. When
fueling, the cap may be placed on the inside of the filler
door.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
•
Never allow any lit smoking materials near the
vehicle while removing the cap or filling the tank.
(Continued)
Gas Cap Holder
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running. This is in violation of most state and
federal regulations and will cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle or on
a truck bed. You could be burned. Always place
gas containers on the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
If fuel is poured from a portable container, the con-
tainer should have a flexible nozzle long enough to
extend into the fuel filler tube.
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each
time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL off.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and shows the month, day, and
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems. Total load must be limited so that
GVWR is not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a vehicle can carry including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options, and cargo.
Certification Label
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes
specified by purchasers for increased durability do not
necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure (Cold)
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex-
ceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight
is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer is the tongue weight. In most
cases it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of
the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue
weights and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
may reduce handling, stability, and braking per-
formance, and could result in an accident.
•
Weight-Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec-
reational vehicle dealer for additional
information.
EXAMPLE — Without Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE — With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) EXAMPLE — Improper Adjustment of Weight-
Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
Trailer Hitch Classification
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to
2,000 lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alter-
ations to the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be
factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing
over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep
Package. See your authorized dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains
the necessary information for your specific drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Fifth Wheel/
Gooseneck
Greater than 10,000 lbs
(4540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drive-
train.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
•
http:// www.dodge.com
•
http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada)
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the
front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle.
Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can
cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will
cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Load-
ing Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam-
age your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance
Schedule. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
(Continued)
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive ve-
hicles, make sure the transfer case is not in NEU-
TRAL. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer so that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
Towing Requirements – Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. For proper
tire inflation procedures, refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
−
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. For the proper inspection
procedure, refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
−
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for further infor-
mation. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations:
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The “DRIVE” range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the
TOW/HAUL feature should be selected.
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL feature while operating
the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will im-
prove performance and extend transmission life by re-
ducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action
will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Mainte-
nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Tow/Haul – If Equipped
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, turn the TOW/HAUL feature ON when driving in
hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on
more severe grades.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can resume cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
SNOWPLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpect-
edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing of two-wheel drive models is not
allowable. Towing the vehicle with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Re-
moval of the driveshaft for towing is not recommended,
since this would allow fluid to drain from the
transmission.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
CAUTION!
•
Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
•
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL button is
located on the lower left hand corner of the trans-
fer case switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case
NEUTRAL can take place with the transfer case
switch in any mode position.
•
Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
position for recreational towing.
•
Failure to follow these procedures can cause se-
vere transmission and/or transfer case damage.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
Recreational Towing Procedure
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not
start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
6.
Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object, press
the transfer case NEUTRAL button for four seconds.
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
comes on, release the NEUTRAL button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Repeat Steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in
DRIVE.
12. Shut the engine OFF, and place the ignition key into
the unlocked OFF position.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK.
14. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
15. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
NOTE:
•
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, and must
continue to be met until the four seconds elapse and
the shift has been completed. If any of these require-
ments (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no
NEUTRAL Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
longer met during the four second timer, then the
NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until
all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button
is released.
•
The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place
and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If
the key in not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
•
Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL and the engine running. With the transfer
case in NEUTRAL, ensure that the engine is OFF
prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
Returning to Normal Operation
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
2. The vehicle must be at a complete stop.
3. Place the ignition key in the OFF position (if it has
been moved or the engine has been started).
4. Place the ignition key into the ON position (engine
off).
5. Press the brake pedal.
6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
7. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for one
second.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off, release
the NEUTRAL button.
9. After the NEUTRAL button has been released, the
transfer case will shift into the position identified by the
transfer case switch.
10. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into DRIVE to
verify that the transfer case has engaged.
11. Set the parking brake. Shift the transmission into
PARK.
NOTE:
•
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, and must
continue to be met until one second elapses and the
shift has been completed. If any of these requirements
(with the exception of 3 - key ON) are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met
during the one second time, then all of the mode
position indicator lights will flash continuously until
all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button
is released.
•
The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place
and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If
the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
•
Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
•
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage
internal parts.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher ................ 332
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 333
▫ Jack Location ....................... 333
▫ Removing The Spare Tire ............... 335
▫ Tire Changing Procedure ............... 337
▫ Preparations ........................ 338
▫ Instructions ........................ 338
▫ To Stow The Flat Or Spare .............. 343
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures ................ 343
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ............. 344
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 345
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 347
䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ...... 348
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 349
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles .............. 349
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles .............. 350
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the top
of the steering column, just behind the steering wheel.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
Hazard Warning Flasher Switch
332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jack Location
In this vehicle, the scissor jack and tire changing tools for
Extended Cab models are stowed in a compartment
under the rear passenger seat. Crew Cab model scissor
jack and tire changing tools are accessed by lifting up the
rear passenger seat.
The jack is secured in place by turning the jack screw
until the jack is secured into place.
A finger-operated helper tool is provided to assist re-
moval and stowage of the jack. This tool must be
removed to operate the jack for changing the spare tire.
Jack Stowage Location (Extended Cab)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333
Jack Screw Jack Stowage Location (Crew Cab)
334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires only.
The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for
service purposes, unless suitable supports are placed
under the vehicle as a safety measure. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
icy or slippery areas.
Removing The Spare Tire
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert
the tube through the access hole in the rear bumper and
into the winch mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench
handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the
center of the wheel.
Steps for Removing the Spare Tire
•
Remove the jack from the stowage compartment using
the supplied finger-assist tool.
•
Remove the finger-assist tool from jack and set aside
until jack is stowed.
•
Assemble the jack tools.
•
Locate the tire carrier access hole on the rear bumper.
•
Place assembled jack tool extension rod into the access
hole in the direction of the arrow on the bumper trim.
•
Rotate the tool counterclockwise to release and lower
the spare tire to the ground so that it can be pulled
from under the vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335
•
Rotate clockwise to stow the spare tire.
Inserting Lug Wrench and Extension
Turning Lug Wrench and Extension
336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to
avoid tangling the loose cable.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Tire Changing Procedure
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The scissor
jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle
only. It is not recommended that the jack be used for
service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.
Spare Tire Stowage Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission).
On 4-Wheel Drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the
4L position.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left
rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
(Continued)
338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
1. Lower and remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools
from stowage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339
3. When changing a front wheel, place the jack under the
frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far
forward as possible on the straight part of the frame prior
to inboard transition, as shown. Operate the jack using
the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench - the tube
extension, may be used but is not required.
4. When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Place the jack under the axle in the
positions shown with the drive tubes extending to the
rear. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
Positioning of the Jack Front Wheels
Left Rear Jacking Location
340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck
parts and adjust the jack position as required.
5. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To
avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
7. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts in
a crisscross pattern. The correct nut tightness is 120 to
160 ft lbs (163 to 217 N·m). If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or at a service station.
Right Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-
ways stow the jack, tools and the extra tire and wheel
in the places provided.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
•
Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
To Stow the Flat or Spare
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn
into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue
to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click
three times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the
tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
NOTE: To Stow the Flat or Spare: Wheel retainer does
not fit through the center of the aluminum wheel. The tire
must be stored in a safe manner in the bed of the truck.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343
WARNING!
When temperatures are below the freezing point,
electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do not
attempt jump-starting because the battery could rup-
ture or explode and cause personal injury. Battery
temperature must be brought above freezing point
before attempting a jump-start.
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
Positive Battery Post
344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. If using a another vehicle to jump-start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
10. Reinstall the air intake duct.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE, while apply-
ing slight pressure to the accelerator.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck. And do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main-
tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine is most effective. Allow the engine to
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347
idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not spin the wheels continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
Tow Hooks
348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
•
Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
•
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recom-
mended. Attach towing device to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack-
ets. State and local laws, applying to vehicles under
tow, must be observed.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
transmission in NEUTRAL and the ignition key in the
OFF position, along with the front wheels raised and the
rear wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed
30 mph (50 km/h), and the distance must not exceed
15 miles (25 km).
If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km)
or faster than 30 mph (50 km/h), it must be towed on a
flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised and the front
wheels on the ground, or with the front end raised and
the rear wheels on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground at more than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more
than 15 miles (25 km), can cause severe transmission
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.7L ............. 353
䡵 Engine Compartment — 4.7L ............. 354
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ...... 355
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 355
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 356
䡵 Replacement Parts ..................... 357
䡵 Dealer Service ........................ 358
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ................. 358
▫ Engine Oil ......................... 359
▫ Engine Oil Filter ..................... 361
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 362
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 362
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 363
▫ Body Lubrication .................... 364
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 365
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ................. 365
7
▫ Exhaust System ..................... 366
▫ Cooling System ..................... 369
▫ Brake System ....................... 374
▫ Automatic Transmission ............... 376
▫ Transfer Case ....................... 379
▫ Axles ............................. 379
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 380
䡵 Fuses .............................. 385
▫ Underhood Fuses
(Power Distribution Center) ............. 385
䡵 Vehicle Storage ....................... 390
䡵 Replacement Bulbs .................... 390
䡵 Bulb Replacement ..................... 391
▫ Headlamp (Halogen)/Front Park And
Turn Signal Lamps ................... 391
▫ Rear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stop Lamps,
And Turn Signal Bulbs ................ 392
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp And
Cargo Lamp ........................ 395
▫ License Lamps ...................... 397
▫ Fog Lamps ......................... 399
䡵 Fluid Capacities ...................... 399
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ....... 400
▫ Engine ............................ 400
▫ Chassis ........................... 401
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Distribution Center 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Battery
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Distribution Center 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Battery
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improp-
erly installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be
displayed in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a
⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset
button to turn the message off. If the problem persists,
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the prob-
lem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the
MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure
the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by
the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance and repairs
will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed-up engine is shut off, or
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart/liter of oil when the reading
is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading
at the top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils, provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
(Continued)
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post, and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+)
positive and (-) negative and are identified on the
battery case.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected,
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oils and Refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), and is an ozone-saving prod-
uct. However, the manufacturer recommends that air
conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers
or other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at
regular intervals. When freezing weather is anticipated,
flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the
system. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer anti-
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system
for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-
low the preceding safety tips.
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open
a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser and
radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty,
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser and radiator.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is intro-
duced into the cooling system in an emergency, it
should be replaced with the specified engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replace-
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34° F
(-37° C) are anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance, requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant recovery bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) level is adequate. With the engine cold, the level
of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the coolant recovery
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing
the engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service at-
tendant of this. As long as the engine operating tempera-
ture is satisfactory, the coolant recovery bottle need only
be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant recovery bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must
also be protected against freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled/deionized water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine, which contains aluminum
components.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, also keep the front of
the condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is on. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the
master cylinder area before removing the cap. With disc
brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
low, check the system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi-
nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
Automatic Transmission
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a dipstick, use
the following procedure. If your vehicle has a capped
dipstick, it is sealed and should not be tampered with.
Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that
the fluid level is set properly.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 180° F (82° C). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (24 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
tween the fingertips.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi-
tion, ending with the shift lever in PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into
the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70° F (21° C) (room
temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180° F (82° C). Remember it is best to check the level at
the normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50° F
(10° C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully-seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended trans-
mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid,
other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid,
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Transfer Case
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
evident the transfer case fluid level may be low. Have the
transfer case serviced immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage may result from operation of the vehicle
with low transfer case fluid.
Drain and Refill
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Axles
Drain and Refill
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Axle
Rear axle limited-slip differentials require the use of
MOPAR威 Limited-Slip Additive or equivalent. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information. This should be
added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is
made, when equipped with limited-slip differential. Rear
axle fluid level should be 1/4 in (6.4 mm) below filler
plug for 8-1/4 in, and 9-1/4 in axles.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
Front Axle
Front axle fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
plug.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
•
Stone and gravel impact
•
Insects, tree sap and tar
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equiva-
lent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains,
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels be kept clear and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up-paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent, or
select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use
scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal pol-
ishes. Only MOPAR威 cleaners or equivalent are recom-
mended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car
washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that
may damage the wheels’ protective finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equiva-
lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent,
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery.
Use MOPAR威 Vinyl Cleaner or equivalent to clean vinyl
upholstery and trim.
Leather Seat Care and Cleaning
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
defrosters, or windshields equipped with a windshield
wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-
ments, which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1.
Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn, or if the
buckles do not work properly.
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
CAUTION!
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it suggests a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distri-
bution center located on the left side of the engine
compartment.
This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and
relays. A description of each fuse and component may be
stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity num-
ber of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
Power Distribution Center
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
corresponds to the following chart. These fuses and
relays can be obtained from your authorized dealer.
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
1 Spare
2 Spare
3 30 Amp
Pink
Electric Brake
4 50 Amp
Red
Power Seat
5 Spare
6 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Cabin Com-
partment Node
(CCN), Radio
7 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)/Fuel/
RAD/AC Coils
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
8 10 Amp
Red
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN)/Mirror/
4x4
9 Spare
10 2 Amp
Gray
Run/Start Ignition
Switch
11 10 Amp
Red
AC Clutch
12 15 Amp
Blue
Trailer Tow Lt Stop/
Turn
13 15 Amp
Blue
Trailer Tow Rt Stop/
Turn
14 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #2
15 25 Amp
Natural
Trans/Powertrain
Control Module
(PCM)
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
16 20 Amp
Yellow
Horn
17 20 Amp
Yellow
ABS Feed (Valves)
18 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump
19 15 Amp
Blue
Center High-Mounted
Stop Light (CHMSL)
20 20 Amp
Yellow
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN) Door
Locks/Brake Trans-
mission Shift Inter-
lock (BTSI)
21 25 Amp
Natural
Audio Amp
22 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet (Switch-
able)
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
23 20 Amp
Yellow
Fog Lamps
24 20 Amp
Yellow
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) B+
25 15 Amp
Blue
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN) Illumi-
nation
26 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Run/Start
Feed
27 10 Amp
Red
Power Mirror
28 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet
29 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Control Module
(FCM) 4 (Wipers)
30 Spare
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
31 30 Amp
Green
Ignition Run/AC/
Windows
32 30 Amp
Pink
Front Control Module
(FCM) 1 (Ext. Lights #
1)
33 30 Amp
Pink
Auto Shut Down
(ASD)
34 30 Amp
Pink
Front Control Module
(FCM) 2 (Ext. Light #
2)
35 40 Amp
Green
HVAC Blower Motor
36 Spare
37 Spare
38 20 Amp
Blue
Spare
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
39 30 Amp
Pink
Starter Solenoid
40 40 Amp
Green
Ignition Run Feeds
41 30 Amp
Pink
Wiper Motor
42 25 Amp
Natural
Front Control Module
(FCM) 5 (T-Case)
43 10 Amp
Red
Lt Park Lamps
44 10 Amp
Red
Rt Park Lamps
45 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow Park
Lamps
46 10 Amp
Red
Airbag System # 2
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
47 Spare
48 20 Amp
Blue
Sunroof/Sound Box
49 30 Amp
Pink
Trailer Tow B+
50 40 Amp
Green
Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) Module
(Pump)
51 40 Amp
Green
Park Lamps
52 Spare
53 40 Amp
Green
Rear Defogger
54 Spare
55 Spare
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
56 10 Amp
Red
Heated Seats
57 20 Amp
Yellow
Airbag System # 2
58 20 Amp
Yellow
Heated Seats
59 10 Amp
Red
HVAC Module
60 10 Amp
Red
ABS Module
61 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Control Module
(FCM) 3 (Reverse
Lamps)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to mini-
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
•
Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw (I.O.D.) fuses located
in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The I.O.D.
cavity includes a snap-in retainer that allows the fuse
to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse
block.
•
The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode
and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain.
•
As an alternative to the above steps you may discon-
nect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb No.
Dome Lamp ........................WL212–2
Cargo Lamp ............................921
Overhead Console Lamps................... 192
Reading Lamp ...................... WL212–2
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior Bulb No.
Headlamp .............................H13
Front Park/Turn/Side Marker ............3157NA
Back-Up .............................. 3157
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp .............921
Fog Lamp .............................9145
License Plate Lamp ....................... 168
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal................. 3057
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp (Halogen)/Front Park and Turn Signal
Lamps
1. Open the hood
2. Remove the three bolts from the front of the headlamp
housing.
3. Grasp the headlamp and pull firmly to disengage the
headlamp housing from the fender panel.
4. While firmly holding the headlamp housing in your
hands, unlock and disconnect headlamp bulb connector.
5. Twist 1/4-turn and remove headlamp bulb from hous-
ing and replace.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
NOTE: The headlamp bulb is a halogen bulb. Take care
not to touch the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from
your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which
reduces bulb life.
To remove the park/turn signal bulb, rotate bulb socket
1/4-turn and remove socket from housing. Pull bulb
straight from socket.
Rear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stop Lamps, And
Turn Signal Bulbs
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed
sheet metal.
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the taillamp housing straight out from the body. 3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the housing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
4. Pull bulb straight out of socket. 5. Reverse this procedure to install bulb and housing.
Place the two raised blocks past the body.
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp And Cargo
Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to
the body, as shown.
2. Remove housing from the cab.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
3. Remove connector from housing tab for more clear-
ance.
4. Turn desired bulb socket 1/4-turn and remove socket
and bulb from housing.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull desired bulb straight from the socket.
•
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
•
Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
6. Reverse this procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
License Lamps
1. Using a screwdriver, pry black rubber housing from
the bumper.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
2. Rotate the socket 1/4-turn counterclockwise. 3. Pull bulb from socket.
4. Reverse this procedure for installation.
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lamps
1. Disconnect connector from the fog lamp by raising the
wire harness lock tab and pulling on wire harness
connector.
2. Rotate the bulb 1/4-turn counterclockwise and pull to
remove from the fog lamp housing.
3. Reverse procedure to install.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 22 Gallons 83 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
4.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.7 Liters
Cooling System (Includes 2.1 Quarts/2 Liters for
Coolant Bottle)
3.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
13.3 Quarts 12.5 Liters
4.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
13.3 Quarts 12.5 Liters
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 3.7L Engine ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])
Spark Plugs – 4.7L Engine Upper Bank — FR8TE2 (Gap 0.039 in [0.99 mm]) Lower Bank —
FR8T1332 (Gap 0.051 in [1.30 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Transfer Case MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
Front Axle SAE 75W-90 Multi-Purpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant (MS-9763) or
equivalent.
Rear Axle SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant (MS-8985). Limited-slip rear axles
require MOPAR威 Limited-Slip Additive (MS-10111) or equivalent. When-
ever a fluid change is made, 4 oz (118 ml) should be added to the gear
lubricant.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is
not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake
fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services in-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
The “Change Oil” message will flash in the instrument
cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicat-
ing that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission, and
add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
NOTE: ** Vehicles built with the 4.7L engine are
equipped with sixteen spark plugs, one set is located on
the top of the engine under the coils, and the second set
is located on the side of the engine.
The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard
plug, and must be changed every 48,000 miles
(80 000 km).
The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a
premium plug, and must be changed every 96,000 miles
(160 000 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if you are using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if you are using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if you are using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 411
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if you are using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve, if
necessary.*
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if you are using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏ Replace the side row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏ Replace the ignition cables (4.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if you are using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 415
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter(s).
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if you are using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if you are using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 419
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle .............................. 423
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ........... 423
▫ Prepare A List ...................... 423
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 423
䡵 If You Need Assistance ................. 423
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 424
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 424
▫ In Mexico Contact .................... 424
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 425
▫ Service Contract ..................... 425
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .... 426
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts ....................... 426
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ................ 427
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 427
▫ In Canada ......................... 427
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 423
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
424 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
line at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 425
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
426 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 427
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
428 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 429
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
430 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Fuel ...........................307
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 362
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............363
Air Conditioning ........................237
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..........237,240
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............. 363,364
Air Conditioning System ................237,363
Air Filter ..............................362
Air Pressure, Tires ....................... 284
Airbag ........................... 46,54,186
Airbag Deployment .......................56
Airbag Light ........................ 53,58,76
Airbag Maintenance ....................... 57
Airbag, Side .......................... 52,54
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ........... 49,52,54
Alarm, Panic ............................ 24
Alarm (Security Alarm) .................19,176
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ............... 19
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............. 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................231
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..............370,399
Disposal ............................372
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............ 270,271
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................176
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........ 19
Anti-Theft System .....................19,176
Appearance Care ........................380
Assistance Towing .......................101
Auto Unlock, Doors ....................... 32
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 84
Automatic Door Locks ..................... 31
Automatic Transaxle .................... 12,252
Interlock System .......................15
Automatic Transmission .............249,253,376
Adding Fluid .........................376
Fluid Level Check ..................... 376
Fluid Type ...........................401
Gear Ranges .........................253
432 INDEX
Special Additives ......................378
Torque Converter ......................257
Axle Fluid ............................. 401
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ............... 379
Battery ............................... 362
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......25
Saving Feature (Protection) ...............130
Belts, Seat ............................ 37,76
Body Mechanism Lubrication ............... 364
Box, Sound ............................229
B-Pillar Location ........................ 279
Brake Fluid ............................401
Brake System ........................ 270,374
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................270,271
Fluid Check .......................... 374
Master Cylinder .......................374
Parking .............................269
Warning Light ..................... 176,181
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............253
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........74
Bulb Replacement ....................... 391
Bulbs, Light .......................... 77,390
Calibration, Compass ..................... 146
Camper ............................... 164
Capacities, Fluid ........................399
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ..........................360
Power Steering ........................ 268
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............371
Car Washes ............................ 380
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............75,164,302
Cargo Light ............................133
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ................... 309
Cellular Phone ........................86,237
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............395
Certification Label .......................309
10
INDEX 433
Changing A Flat Tire ..................... 333
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 275
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)
. . 356
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............74
Checks, Safety ...........................74
Child Restraint ........................61,62
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ............. 64,70
Child Seat ..............................67
Cleaning
Wheels ............................. 382
Climate Control ......................... 237
Clock ..................187,189,204,206,209,218
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............236
Compass .............................. 146
Compass Calibration .....................146
Compass Variance .......................147
Computer, Trip/Travel ....................142
Console, Floor .......................... 159
Console, Overhead .......................141
Contract, Service ........................425
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .......... 371
Cooling System ......................... 369
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............. 370
Coolant Capacity ......................399
Coolant Level ......................369,372
Disposal of Used Coolant ................372
Drain, Flush, and Refill .................. 369
Inspection ...........................372
Points to Remember ....................373
Pressure Cap .........................371
Radiator Cap ......................... 371
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......370,399,400
Temperature Gauge .................... 174
Crates
Rear Convenience Storage ................ 157
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............138
Cupholders ............................ 156
Customer Assistance .....................423
434 INDEX
Daytime Running Lights ...................132
Dealer Service ..........................358
Defroster, Rear Window ................... 162
Defroster, Windshield ...................76,239
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ................. 135
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................ 355
Differential, Limited-Slip ..................264
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................. 175
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission .................376
Oil (Engine) ..........................359
Power Steering ........................ 268
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............... 372
Door Locks ............................. 29
Door Opener, Garage ..................... 148
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ..............................265
E-85 Fuel .............................303
Electric Remote Mirrors ....................85
Electrical Power Outlets ................... 154
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 138
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ............... 347
Jacking .............................337
Jump Starting .........................343
Tow Hooks ..........................348
Towing ............................. 349
Emission Control System Maintenance ......356,404
Engine
Air Cleaner ..........................362
Block Heater .........................251
Break-In Recommendations ................ 74
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................... 400
Exhaust Gas Caution .................. 75,302
Flooded, Starting ......................250
Fuel Requirements .....................399
10
INDEX 435
Jump Starting .........................343
Oil ........................... 359,399,400
Oil Filler Cap ......................... 360
Oil Selection .......................... 399
Oil Synthetic .........................361
Starting ............................. 249
Temperature Gauge .................... 174
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........55
Entry System, Illuminated .................. 20
Exhaust Gas Caution ................ 75,302,366
Exhaust System .......................75,366
Extender, Seat Belt ........................ 46
Exterior Lighting ........................131
Exterior Lights ..........................77
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................362
Engine Oil ........................ 361,400
Engine Oil Disposal ....................361
Flashers
Hazard Warning .......................332
Turn Signal ................... 77,133,174,392
Flat Tire Stowage ........................ 343
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range .......................306
Engine Oil ...........................305
Fuel Requirements ..................303,304
Maintenance .........................306
Replacement Parts .....................306
Starting ............................. 306
Flooded Engine Starting ...................250
Floor Console ..........................159
Fluid, Brake ........................... 401
Fluid Capacities .........................399
Fluid Leaks ............................. 77
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission .................376
Brake ..............................374
436 INDEX
Engine Oil ...........................359
Power Steering ........................ 268
Transfer Case .........................379
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........400
Fog Lights ..........................132,399
Four Wheel Drive ....................... 258
Operation ........................... 258
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ..................332
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................... 347
Front Axle (Differential) ...................380
Fuel ................................. 298
Adding ............................. 307
Gauge ..............................174
Octane Rating ...................... 298,400
Requirements ......................298,399
Tank Capacity ........................ 399
Fuel, Flexible ............. See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fueling ...............................307
Fuses ................................ 385
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ........... 148
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............ 307,308,355
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) ...................174
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................298
Gasoline, Reformulated ................... 299
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ................... 174
Fuel ...............................174
Odometer .........................177,179
Speedometer ......................... 176
Tachometer .......................... 177
Gear Ranges ........................... 253
General Information ................... 115,298
Glass Cleaning .......................... 384
Grocery Bag Retainer .....................159
Gross Axle Weight Rating ............... 310,312
Gross Cargo Weight ......................309
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................ 312
GVWR ............................... 309
10
INDEX 437
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect™) ..............86
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................ 265
Hazard Warning Flasher ................... 332
Headlights ............................ 391
High Beam ..........................134
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........134
Lights On Reminder ....................132
Passing .............................134
Switch .............................. 131
Heated Seats ...........................126
Heater, Engine Block .....................251
High Beam Indicator ..................... 175
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 134
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................316
Holder, Cup ...........................156
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 148
Hood Release ..........................127
Ignition
Key ................................12
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................16
Infant Restraint ..........................61
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................83
Instrument Cluster ....................... 174
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............172
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............. 384
Interior Appearance Care .................. 383
Interior Lights ..........................129
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........135
Introduction .............................4
Jack Operation .......................333,337
Jacking Instructions ...................... 338
Jump Starting ..........................343
438 INDEX
Key, Programming ........................17
Key, Replacement ........................17
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................16
Keyless Entry System ...................... 21
Keys ................................. 12
Knee Bolster ............................46
Lane Change and Turn Signals .........133,174,392
Lane Change Assist ...................... 134
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................37
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
..64
Latches ................................ 77
Leaks, Fluid ............................ 77
Life of Tires ............................ 288
Light Bulbs ............................. 77
Lights ..............................77,129
Airbag ........................ 53,58,76,186
Anti-Lock Warning ..................... 176
Back-Up ............................392
Brake Warning ........................ 181
Bulb Replacement ................... 390,391
Cargo ..............................133
Center Mounted Stop ...................395
Courtesy/Reading ..................... 142
Cruise ..............................186
Daytime Running ......................132
Exterior ..............................77
Fog .......................... 132,180,399
Hazard Warning Flasher .................332
Headlights ........................... 131
High Beam ..........................134
High Beam/Low Beam Select .............134
Instrument Cluster .....................174
Intensity Control ...................... 129
Interior .......................... 129,142
License .............................397
Lights On Reminder ....................132
Low Fuel ............................ 174
10
INDEX 439
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........ 183
Passing .............................134
Seat Belt Reminder .....................175
Service .............................390
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........... 184
Turn Signal ................... 77,133,391,392
Voltage .............................176
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....174
Limited-Slip Differential ...................264
Loading Vehicle ......................... 309
Tires ...............................279
Locks ................................. 29
Auto Unlock ..........................32
Automatic Door ........................ 31
Child Protection ........................ 33
Door ................................ 29
Keys ................................12
Power Door ...........................30
Steering Wheel ......................... 15
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
..64
Lubrication, Body ....................... 364
Lug Nuts .............................341
Lumbar Support ........................122
Maintenance Free Battery ..................362
Maintenance Procedures ................... 358
Maintenance Schedule .................... 404
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 183,356
Manual, Service ......................... 428
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection ..................... 401
Map/Reading Lights .....................142
Mirrors ................................ 83
Automatic Dimming ..................... 84
Electric Powered ....................... 85
Outside ..............................84
Rearview .............................83
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............. 7
440 INDEX
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............293
Mopar Parts ......................... 357,426
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............133
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 74
Occupant Restraints ................... 36,52,56
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) .............49,52,54
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............298
Oil Change Indicator ..................... 179
Oil Change Indicator, Reset .................179
Oil, Engine .........................359,400
Capacity ............................399
Change Interval ....................... 359
Dipstick ............................. 359
Disposal ............................361
Filter ............................ 361,400
Filter Disposal ........................ 361
Identification Logo .....................360
Materials Added to .....................361
Recommendation ................... 360,399
Synthetic ............................361
Viscosity .........................360,399
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............355,356
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ...........148
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................84
Overdrive .......................... 177,254
Overdrive OFF Switch .................... 254
Overhead Console .................... 141,142
Overhead Travel Information Center .......... 142
Overheating, Engine ......................175
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .........4,428
Panic Alarm ............................24
Parking Brake ..........................269
Parking On Hill .........................269
Passing Light ...........................134
10
INDEX 441
Pets ..................................73
Pets, Transporting ........................73
Phone, Cellular ..........................86
Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect™) ..............86
Pickup Box ............................ 166
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 279
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) ...............385
Door Locks ......................... 20,30
Mirrors ..............................85
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........154
Steering ..........................267,268
Windows .............................34
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 401
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts .............. 46
Preparation for Jacking ....................338
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................ 44
Quad Cab .............................126
Radial Ply Tires .........................286
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......369,371
Radio Operation ........................ 237
Radio, Satellite (uconnect威 studios) ........... 230
Rear Axle (Differential) .................... 379
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ...............161
Rear Convenience Storage Crates ............. 157
Rear Window ..........................163
Rear Window Defroster ................... 162
Rear Window Features ....................162
Rearview Mirrors ........................83
Reclining Front Seats ..................... 121
Recreational Towing ......................325
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .......326
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 328
Reformulated Gasoline ....................299
Refrigerant ............................ 364
442 INDEX
Release, Hood ..........................127
Reminder, Seat Belt ....................... 45
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................. 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........ 235
Remote Starting System .................... 26
Replacement Keys ........................17
Replacement Parts .......................357
Replacement Tires .......................288
Reporting Safety Defects ...................427
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ..............179
Restraints, Child ....................... 61,67
Restraints, Occupant ......................36
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................ 347
Rotation, Tires .......................... 292
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ................. 76
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............77
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................427
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................75
Safety Information, Tire ...................273
Safety Tips .............................74
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................231
Satellite Radio (uconnect威 studios) ...........230
Schedule, Maintenance ....................404
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................384
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 45
Seat Belts ..........................36,37,76
And Pregnant Women ...................46
Child Restraint ....................... 61,62
Extender .............................46
Front Seat ............................ 37
Inspection ............................76
Pretensioners .......................... 44
Reminder ............................175
Seats .................................120
Adjustment ..........................121
Heated .............................126
Lumbar Support .......................122
10
INDEX 443
Reclining ............................ 121
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .............19,176
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........370,400
Selection of Oil .........................360
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................16
Sentry Key Programming ................... 17
Sentry Key Replacement ...................17
Service and Maintenance .................. 358
Service Assistance .......................423
Service Contract .........................425
Service Manuals ........................428
Setting the Clock ..........187,189,204,206,209,218
Shifting
Automatic Transmission .................253
Transfer Case .........................258
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) .......................... 326
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) .......................... 328
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ..............42
Shoulder Belts ...........................37
Signals, Turn ...................77,133,174,392
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ................. 290
Snow Plow ............................324
Snow Tires ............................292
Sound Box ............................229
Spare Tire .............................335
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............138
Speedometer ...........................176
Starting ...............................249
Engine Block Heater ....................251
Engine Fails to Start .................... 250
Remote .............................. 26
Steering
Column Controls ......................133
Power ...........................267,268
Wheel Lock ........................... 15
Wheel, Tilt ........................... 137
444 INDEX
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls
. . 235
Storage, Behind the Seat ...................157
Storage Bin ............................ 157
Storage, Vehicle .........................390
Stuck, Freeing .......................... 347
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................... 361
System, Remote Starting ....................26
Tachometer ............................ 177
Tailgate ............................... 165
Taillights ..............................392
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ..........174
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............64
Tilt Steering Column ..................... 137
Tip Start ..............................249
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........279
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............277
Tire Markings ..........................273
Tire Safety Information ....................273
Tires ............................ 77,283,429
Aging (Life of Tires) .................... 288
Air Pressure ..........................283
Chains ..............................290
Changing ............................333
General Information .................... 283
High Speed .......................... 285
Inflation Pressures .....................284
Jacking .............................337
Life of Tires ..........................288
Load Capacity .....................279,280
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........293
Pressure Warning Light ..................184
Quality Grading .......................429
Radial ..............................286
Replacement ......................... 288
Rotation ............................292
Safety ........................... 273,283
Sizes ...............................275
10
INDEX 445
Snow Tires ...........................292
Spare Tire ........................... 335
Spinning ............................286
Tread Wear Indicators ...................287
Wheel Mounting ......................337
Wheel Nut Torque .....................341
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .............. 317
Torque Converter Clutch ..................257
Tow Hooks, Emergency ................... 348
Towing ...............................311
24-Hour Towing Assistance ...............101
Disabled Vehicle ....................... 349
Guide ..............................317
Recreational .......................... 325
Weight ..............................317
Towing Assistance .......................101
Traction .............................. 264
Trailer Towing ..........................311
Cooling System Tips .................... 324
Hitches .............................316
Minimum Requirements ................. 318
Trailer and Tongue Weight ............... 317
Wiring ..............................322
Trailer Towing Guide ..................... 317
Trailer Weight .......................... 317
Transaxle ............................. 252
Automatic ......................... 12,252
Manual .............................. 14
Operation ........................... 252
Transfer Case ........................... 379
Fluid ...............................401
Transmission ........................ 253,376
Automatic ...................... 249,253,376
Fluid ...............................401
Maintenance .........................376
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 148
446 INDEX
Tread Wear Indicators ....................287
Trip Computer ..........................142
Trip Odometer ..........................179
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................ 187
Turn Signals ...................133,174,391,392
uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ..............86
Underhood Fuses ........................ 385
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 429
Universal Transmitter .....................148
Unlock, Auto ...........................32
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ............... 161
Variance, Compass ....................... 147
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............ 6
Vehicle Loading ...................... 280,309
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 7
Vehicle Storage .........................390
Voice Recognition System (VR) .............. 115
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description)
. . 174
Warnings and Cautions ..................... 6
Warranty Information ..................... 426
Washers, Windshield .....................136
Washing Vehicle ......................... 380
Water
Driving Through ......................265
Weight Load Carrying ....................309
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................382
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................382
Wheel Changing ........................333
Wheel Mounting ........................337
Wheel Nut Torque ....................... 341
Wind Buffeting ..........................36
Window Fogging ........................ 241
Windows ..............................34
Power ............................... 34
Rear Sliding .......................... 162
Windshield Defroster ................... 76,239
10
INDEX 447
Windshield Washers ................ 135,136,365
Fluid ............................135,365
Windshield Wiper Blades .................. 365
Windshield Wipers ....................... 135
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................365
Wipers, Intermittent ...................... 135
Wrecker Towing ......................... 349
448 INDEX
Chrysler Group LLC
10ND33-126-AB
2nd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
